blob: 71985e95d2d958b13a0afae11f04dcf823fca1ed [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +03008 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02009 * Copyright (C) 2018 Intel Corporation
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070010 *
11 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
12 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
13 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
14 */
15
16#ifndef MAC80211_H
17#define MAC80211_H
18
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050019#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070020#include <linux/kernel.h>
21#include <linux/if_ether.h>
22#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070024#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +020025#include <net/codel.h>
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +030026#include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +020027#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070028
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040029/**
30 * DOC: Introduction
31 *
32 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
33 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
34 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
35 * drivers.
36 */
37
38/**
39 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
40 *
41 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070042 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
43 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
44 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010045 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
46 * tasklet function.
47 *
48 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070049 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070050 */
51
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040052/**
53 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070054 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040055 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
56 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
57 */
58
59/**
60 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070061 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040062 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
63 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
64 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
65 * hardware.
66 *
67 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
68 *
69 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
70 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
71 *
72 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
73 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070074 */
75
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020076/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040077 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
78 *
79 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
80 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
81 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
82 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
83 *
84 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
85 * suspend.
86 *
87 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
88 *
89 */
90
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010091/**
92 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
93 *
94 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
95 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
96 * between different stations/interfaces.
97 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
98 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
99 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
100 *
101 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
102 * driver operation.
103 *
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +0300104 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
105 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
106 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +0100107 *
108 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
109 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
110 *
Johannes Berge7881bd52017-12-19 10:11:54 +0100111 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
112 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
113 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +0100114 *
115 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
116 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
117 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
118 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
119 * .release_buffered_frames().
120 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
121 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
122 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
123 */
124
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500125struct device;
126
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400127/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200128 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
129 *
130 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100131 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200132 */
133enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200134 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100135 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200136};
137
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200138#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
139
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200140/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800141 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
142 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
143 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
144 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
145 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
146 */
147enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
148 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
149 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
150 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
151 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
152};
153
154/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400155 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
156 *
157 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100158 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400159 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400160 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200161 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
162 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400163 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100164 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300165 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200166 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +0300167 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
168 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400169 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700170struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200171 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100172 u16 cw_min;
173 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200174 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300175 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200176 bool uapsd;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +0300177 bool mu_edca;
178 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700179};
180
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700181struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
182 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
183 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
184 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
185 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
186};
187
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100188/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200189 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100190 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200191 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100192 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
194 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200196 */
197enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100198 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200199 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100200 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200201 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200202 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200203};
204
205/**
206 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
207 *
208 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
209 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
210 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100211 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200212 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200213 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
214 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
215 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
216 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100217 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100218 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200219 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
220 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
221 */
222struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100223 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200224 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200225
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200226 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
227
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100228 bool radar_enabled;
229
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100230 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200231};
232
233/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300234 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
235 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
236 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
237 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
239 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
240 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
241 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
242 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
243 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
244 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
245 * for changes/removal.)
246 */
247enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
248 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
249 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
250};
251
252/**
253 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
254 *
255 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
256 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
257 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
258 * done.
259 *
260 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
261 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
262 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
263 */
264struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
265 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
266 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
267 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
268};
269
270/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100271 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
272 *
273 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
274 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
275 *
276 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
277 * also implies a change in the AID.
278 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300280 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700281 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200282 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200283 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200284 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
285 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
287 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
288 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
289 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200290 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200291 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300292 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200293 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
294 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200295 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200296 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200297 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300298 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200299 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100300 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200301 * changed
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300302 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
303 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100304 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
305 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
306 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100307 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200308 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300309 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
310 * keep alive) changed.
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapudcbe73c2018-03-22 12:18:03 -0700311 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapubc847972018-10-03 20:19:20 -0700312 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fime timing reasurement request responder
313 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapudcbe73c2018-03-22 12:18:03 -0700314 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100315 */
316enum ieee80211_bss_change {
317 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
318 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
319 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300320 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200321 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200322 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200323 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200324 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
325 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
326 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200327 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200328 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300329 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200330 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200331 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300332 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200333 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300334 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200335 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100336 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300337 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100338 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100339 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200340 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300341 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24,
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapudcbe73c2018-03-22 12:18:03 -0700342 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25,
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapubc847972018-10-03 20:19:20 -0700343 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200344
345 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100346};
347
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300348/*
349 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
350 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
351 * filtering will be disabled.
352 */
353#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
354
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100355/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200356 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
357 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200358 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300359 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300360 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
361 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
362 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700363 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200364enum ieee80211_event_type {
365 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200366 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300367 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300368 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200369};
370
371/**
372 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
373 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
374 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
375 */
376enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700377 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
378 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
379};
380
381/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200382 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200383 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
384 */
385struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
386 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
387};
388
389/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200390 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
391 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200392 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200393 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
394 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200395 */
396enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
397 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200398 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200399 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
400 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200401};
402
403/**
404 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
405 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
406 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
407 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
408 */
409enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
410 MLME_SUCCESS,
411 MLME_DENIED,
412 MLME_TIMEOUT,
413};
414
415/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200416 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200417 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
418 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
419 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
420 */
421struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
422 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
423 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
424 u16 reason;
425};
426
427/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300428 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
429 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
430 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300431 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300432 */
433struct ieee80211_ba_event {
434 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
435 u16 tid;
436 u16 ssn;
437};
438
439/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200440 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200441 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200442 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200443 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300444 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300445 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200446 */
447struct ieee80211_event {
448 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
449 union {
450 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200451 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300452 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200453 } u;
454};
455
456/**
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200457 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
458 *
459 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
460 *
461 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
462 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
463 */
464struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
465 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
466 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
467};
468
469/**
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapubc847972018-10-03 20:19:20 -0700470 * ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
471 *
472 * @lci: LCI subelement content
473 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
474 * @lci_len: LCI data length
475 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
476 */
477struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
478 const u8 *lci;
479 const u8 *civicloc;
480 size_t lci_len;
481 size_t civicloc_len;
482};
483
484/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100485 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
486 *
487 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
488 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
489 *
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +0300490 * @bss_color: 6-bit value to mark inter-BSS frame, if BSS supports HE
491 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
492 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
493 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
494 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
495 * ACK, BACK or both
496 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
497 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
498 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100499 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200500 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
501 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530502 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100503 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
504 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200505 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
506 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100507 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200508 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300509 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200510 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100511 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
512 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
513 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
514 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200515 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200516 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
517 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200518 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100519 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
520 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200521 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
522 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
523 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700524 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800525 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200526 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
527 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
528 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300529 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100530 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200531 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
532 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100533 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
534 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200535 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100536 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Avri Altman22f66892015-08-18 16:52:07 +0300537 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
538 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
539 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200540 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
Johannes Berge86abc62015-10-22 17:35:14 +0200541 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
542 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
543 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
Andrew Zaborowski2c3c5f8c2017-02-10 04:50:22 +0100544 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
545 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
546 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
547 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200548 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300549 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
550 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
551 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
552 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100553 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
554 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
555 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200556 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200557 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
558 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
559 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300560 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
561 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200562 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300563 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
564 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200565 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100566 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
567 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
568 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
569 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
570 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
571 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100572 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200573 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
574 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
575 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300576 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
577 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
578 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
579 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
580 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
581 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
582 * station.
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapubc847972018-10-03 20:19:20 -0700583 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
584 * responder functionality.
585 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100586 */
587struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200588 const u8 *bssid;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +0300589 u8 bss_color;
590 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
591 bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
592 bool uora_exists;
593 bool ack_enabled;
594 u8 uora_ocw_range;
595 u16 frame_time_rts_th;
596 bool he_support;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100597 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200598 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530599 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100600 u16 aid;
601 /* erp related data */
602 bool use_cts_prot;
603 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300604 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200605 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800606 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700607 u16 beacon_int;
608 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200609 u64 sync_tsf;
610 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100611 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100612 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300613 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200614 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200615 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200616 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
617 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Andrew Zaborowski2c3c5f8c2017-02-10 04:50:22 +0100618 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
619 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100620 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200621 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300622 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100623 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200624 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200625 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300626 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300627 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
628 size_t ssid_len;
629 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200630 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100631 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100632 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200633 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300634 u16 max_idle_period;
635 bool protected_keep_alive;
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapubc847972018-10-03 20:19:20 -0700636 bool ftm_responder;
637 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100638};
639
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800640/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200641 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800642 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700643 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800644 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100645 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200646 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
647 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
648 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
649 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
650 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
651 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
652 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
653 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
654 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
655 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
656 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200657 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200658 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
659 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200660 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200661 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
662 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200663 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200664 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200665 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
666 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
667 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
668 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
669 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
670 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
671 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
672 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200673 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
674 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
675 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300676 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
677 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200678 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
679 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
680 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600681 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
682 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
683 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100684 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
685 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
686 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200687 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
688 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200689 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
690 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100691 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
692 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
693 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200694 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
695 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
696 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
697 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100698 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
699 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
700 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100701 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
702 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
703 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200704 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
705 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
706 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400707 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200708 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
709 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100710 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
711 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
712 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
713 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200714 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
715 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
716 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530717 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
718 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
719 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200720 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
721 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
722 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200723 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
724 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530725 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
726 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
727 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200728 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
729 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
730 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530731 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
732 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
733 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
734 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
735 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200736 *
737 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
738 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800739 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200740enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200741 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200742 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
743 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
744 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
745 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
746 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
747 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
748 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
749 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
750 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
751 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
752 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
753 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600754 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100755 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200756 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200757 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100758 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200759 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100760 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100761 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200762 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400763 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200764 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100765 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200766 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530767 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200768 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530769 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200770 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530771 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200772};
773
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200774#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
775
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200776/**
777 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
778 *
779 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
780 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530781 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
782 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100783 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100784 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200785 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200786 *
787 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
788 */
789enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
790 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530791 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100792 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100793 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200794 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200795};
796
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200797/*
798 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
799 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
800 */
801#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
802 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
803 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
804 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
805 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100806 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200807 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200808 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200809
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530810/**
811 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
812 * Rate Control algorithm.
813 *
814 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
815 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
816 *
817 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
818 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
819 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
820 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
821 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100822 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
823 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530824 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
825 * Greenfield mode.
826 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100827 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
828 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
829 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530830 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
831 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
832 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
833 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
834 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200835enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
836 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
837 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
838 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
839
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100840 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200841 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
842 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
843 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
844 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
845 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100846 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
847 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
848 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800849};
850
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200851
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200852/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
853#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200854
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200855/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
856#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
857
858/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200859#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200860
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200861/* maximum number of rate table entries */
862#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
863
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200864/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200865 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200866 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200867 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
868 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200869 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200870 *
871 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
872 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
873 *
874 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
875 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200876 *
877 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
878 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
879 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
880 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300881 * information::
882 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200883 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300884 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200885 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
886 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
887 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
888 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300889 * information should then contain::
890 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200891 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300892 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200893 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
894 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200895 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200896struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
897 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100898 u16 count:5,
899 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000900} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200901
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100902#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
903
904static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
905 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
906{
907 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200908 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
909 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100910}
911
912static inline u8
913ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
914{
915 return rate->idx & 0xF;
916}
917
918static inline u8
919ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
920{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200921 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100922}
923
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200924/**
925 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200926 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200927 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
928 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
929 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
930 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
931 *
932 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200933 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200934 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100935 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700936 * @control: union for control data
937 * @status: union for status data
938 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100939 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700940 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100941 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700942 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200943 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200944 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200945struct ieee80211_tx_info {
946 /* common information */
947 u32 flags;
948 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200949
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200950 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100951
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100952 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100953
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200954 union {
955 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200956 union {
957 /* rate control */
958 struct {
959 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
960 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
961 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200962 u8 use_rts:1;
963 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200964 u8 short_preamble:1;
965 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200966 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200967 };
968 /* only needed before rate control */
969 unsigned long jiffies;
970 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200971 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berg53168212017-06-22 12:20:30 +0200972 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200973 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200974 u32 flags;
Johannes Berg53168212017-06-22 12:20:30 +0200975 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200976 } control;
977 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200978 u64 cookie;
979 } ack;
980 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200981 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200982 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200983 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100984 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200985 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300986 u16 tx_time;
Venkateswara Naralasettya78b26f2018-02-13 11:04:46 +0530987 bool is_valid_ack_signal;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300988 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200989 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200990 struct {
991 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
992 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200993 u8 pad[4];
994
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200995 void *rate_driver_data[
996 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
997 };
998 void *driver_data[
999 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001000 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001001};
1002
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03001003/**
Felix Fietkau18fb84d2017-04-26 17:11:35 +02001004 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx staus info for rate control
1005 *
1006 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1007 * @info: Basic tx status information
1008 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1009 */
1010struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1011 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1012 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1013 struct sk_buff *skb;
1014};
1015
1016/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001017 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1018 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02001019 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1020 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1021 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001022 *
1023 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1024 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1025 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1026 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1027 */
1028struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02001029 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1030 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001031 const u8 *common_ies;
1032 size_t common_ie_len;
1033};
1034
1035
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001036static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1037{
1038 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1039}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001040
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001041static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1042{
1043 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1044}
1045
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001046/**
1047 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1048 *
1049 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1050 *
1051 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1052 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1053 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1054 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1055 *
1056 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1057 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1058 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1059 */
1060static inline void
1061ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1062{
1063 int i;
1064
1065 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1066 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1067 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1068 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1069 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1070 /* clear the rate counts */
1071 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1072 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1073
1074 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +02001075 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001076 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1077 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1078 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1079}
1080
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001081
1082/**
1083 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1084 *
1085 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1086 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1087 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1088 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001089 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1090 * verification has been done by the hardware.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001091 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001092 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1093 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001094 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1095 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1096 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1097 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
Luis de Bethencourt84ea3a182016-03-18 16:09:29 +00001098 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1099 * de-duplication by itself.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -04001100 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1101 * the frame.
1102 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1103 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001104 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +01001105 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1106 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1107 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001108 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1109 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1110 * (including FCS) was received.
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001111 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1112 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +01001113 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1114 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001115 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1116 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1117 * each A-MPDU
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001118 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1119 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1120 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1121 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1122 * on this subframe
1123 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1124 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001125 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1126 * done by the hardware
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001127 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1128 * processing it in any regular way.
1129 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1130 * them for sniffing purposes.
1131 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1132 * monitor interfaces.
1133 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1134 * them for sniffing purposes.
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001135 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1136 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1137 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1138 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1139 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1140 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1141 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1142 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1143 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001144 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1145 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1146 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001147 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1148 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1149 * the first subframe.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001150 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1151 * be done in the hardware.
Johannes Berg7299d6f2018-02-19 14:48:39 +02001152 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1153 * frame
1154 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001155 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1156 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1157 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1158 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1159 * - DATA3_CODING
1160 * - DATA5_GI
1161 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1162 * - DATA6_NSTS
1163 * - DATA3_STBC
1164 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1165 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1166 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
Shaul Triebitzd1332e72018-08-31 11:31:20 +03001167 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
Shaul Triebitzc3d1f872018-09-05 08:06:06 +03001168 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1169 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is
1170 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't
1171 * known the frame shouldn't be reported.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001172 */
1173enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001174 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1175 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001176 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001177 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1178 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1179 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1180 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001181 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001182 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1183 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1184 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1185 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1186 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1187 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1188 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1189 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1190 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1191 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1192 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1193 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1194 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20),
1195 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1196 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1197 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
Johannes Berg7299d6f2018-02-19 14:48:39 +02001198 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24),
1199 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25),
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001200 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26),
1201 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27),
Shaul Triebitzd1332e72018-08-31 11:31:20 +03001202 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28),
Shaul Triebitzc3d1f872018-09-05 08:06:06 +03001203 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001204};
1205
1206/**
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001207 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001208 *
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001209 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001210 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1211 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1212 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1213 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1214 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
1215 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1216 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001217 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001218 */
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001219enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1220 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001221 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1222 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1223 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1224 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1225 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001226};
1227
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001228#define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1229
1230enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1231 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1232 RX_ENC_HT,
1233 RX_ENC_VHT,
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001234 RX_ENC_HE,
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001235};
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001236
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001237/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001238 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1239 *
1240 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1241 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001242 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001243 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001244 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1245 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001246 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1247 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001248 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1249 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001250 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001251 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Johannes Berg4352a4d2015-12-08 16:04:35 +02001252 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1253 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001254 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1255 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1256 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001257 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1258 * values were filled.
1259 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1260 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001261 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001262 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001263 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
Johannes Berg8613c942017-04-26 13:51:41 +02001264 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001265 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001266 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1267 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001268 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001269 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1270 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1271 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001272 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001273 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1274 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1275 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Shaul Triebitzc3d1f872018-09-05 08:06:06 +03001276 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001277 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001278struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1279 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001280 u64 boottime_ns;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001281 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001282 u32 ampdu_reference;
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001283 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001284 u16 freq;
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001285 u8 enc_flags;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001286 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1287 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001288 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg8613c942017-04-26 13:51:41 +02001289 u8 nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001290 u8 rx_flags;
1291 u8 band;
1292 u8 antenna;
1293 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001294 u8 chains;
1295 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001296 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Shaul Triebitzc3d1f872018-09-05 08:06:06 +03001297 u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001298};
1299
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001300/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001301 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1302 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1303 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1304 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1305 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1306 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1307 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1308 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1309 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1310 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1311 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1312 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1313 * @data field.
1314 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1315 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1316 * length
1317 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1318 *
1319 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1320 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1321 * data.
1322 */
1323struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1324 u32 present;
1325 u8 align;
1326 u8 oui[3];
1327 u8 subns;
1328 u8 pad;
1329 u16 len;
1330 u8 data[];
1331} __packed;
1332
1333/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001334 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1335 *
1336 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1337 *
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001338 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1339 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1340 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001341 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1342 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1343 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1344 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1345 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1346 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1347 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001348 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1349 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1350 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1351 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1352 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001353 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1354 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001355 */
1356enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001357 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001358 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001359 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001360 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001361};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001362
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001363
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001364/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001365 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1366 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001367 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001368 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001369 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001370 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001371 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001372 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001373 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001374 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001375 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1376 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001377 */
1378enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001379 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001380 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001381 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001382 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001383 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1384 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1385 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001386 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001387};
1388
1389/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001390 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1391 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001392 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1393 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1394 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1395 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1396 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001397 */
1398enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1399 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1400 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1401 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1402 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1403
1404 /* keep last */
1405 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1406};
1407
1408/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001409 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1410 *
1411 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1412 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001413 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1414 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001415 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001416 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1417 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1418 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001419 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1420 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1421 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1422 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001423 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1424 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001425 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001426 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001427 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001428 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001429 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001430 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1431 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001432 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001433 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1434 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001435 *
1436 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1437 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001438 * configured for an HT channel.
1439 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1440 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001441 */
1442struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001443 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001444 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001445
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001446 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001447 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001448
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001449 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1450
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001451 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001452 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001453 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001454};
1455
1456/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001457 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1458 *
1459 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1460 * operation.
1461 *
1462 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1463 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1464 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1465 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001466 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1467 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001468 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1469 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001470 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001471 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1472 */
1473struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1474 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001475 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001476 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001477 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001478 u8 count;
1479};
1480
1481/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001482 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1483 *
1484 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1485 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001486 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1487 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1488 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1489 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001490 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1491 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1492 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1493 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001494 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1495 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1496 * this is not pure P2P vif.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001497 */
1498enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1499 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001500 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001501 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001502 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001503};
1504
1505/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001506 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1507 *
1508 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1509 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1510 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001511 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001512 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1513 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001514 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001515 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1516 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001517 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1518 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1519 * for read access.
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001520 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001521 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1522 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1523 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1524 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001525 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1526 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001527 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1528 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1529 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1530 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1531 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001532 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001533 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001534 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001535 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1536 * interface.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001537 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001538 * sizeof(void \*).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001539 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Manikanta Pubbisetty21a5d4c2018-07-11 00:12:53 +05301540 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1541 * protected by fq->lock.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001542 */
1543struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001544 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001545 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Michael Brauna3e2f4b2016-10-15 13:28:19 +02001546 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001547 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001548 bool csa_active;
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001549 bool mu_mimo_owner;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001550
1551 u8 cab_queue;
1552 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1553
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001554 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1555
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001556 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1557
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001558 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001559
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001560#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1561 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1562#endif
1563
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001564 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1565
Manikanta Pubbisetty21a5d4c2018-07-11 00:12:53 +05301566 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1567
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001568 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001569 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001570};
1571
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001572static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1573{
1574#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001575 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001576#endif
1577 return false;
1578}
1579
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001580/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001581 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1582 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1583 *
1584 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1585 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1586 *
1587 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1588 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1589 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1590 */
1591struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1592
1593/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001594 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1595 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1596 *
1597 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1598 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1599 *
1600 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1601 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1602 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1603 */
1604struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1605
1606/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001607 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1608 *
1609 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1610 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1611 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001612 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1613 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001614 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1615 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001616 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1617 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1618 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001619 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1620 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001621 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001622 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1623 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001624 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001625 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001626 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001627 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1628 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1629 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001630 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1631 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1632 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1633 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1634 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1635 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1636 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001637 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001638 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001639 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001640 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1641 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1642 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
David Spinadel9de18d82017-12-01 13:50:52 +02001643 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1644 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1645 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001646 */
1647enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001648 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1649 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1650 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1651 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1652 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1653 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1654 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001655 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
David Spinadel9de18d82017-12-01 13:50:52 +02001656 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001657};
1658
1659/**
1660 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1661 *
1662 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1663 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1664 *
1665 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1666 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001667 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001668 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001669 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1670 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001671 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1672 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1673 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001674 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1675 * data block:
1676 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1677 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1678 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001679 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1680 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001681 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001682struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001683 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001684 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001685 u8 icv_len;
1686 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001687 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001688 s8 keyidx;
David Spinadel9de18d82017-12-01 13:50:52 +02001689 u16 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001690 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001691 u8 key[0];
1692};
1693
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001694#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1695
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001696#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1697#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1698
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001699/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001700 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1701 *
1702 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1703 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1704 * reverse order than in packet)
1705 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1706 * reverse order than in packet)
1707 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1708 * reverse order than in packet)
1709 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1710 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001711 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001712 */
1713struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1714 union {
1715 struct {
1716 u32 iv32;
1717 u16 iv16;
1718 } tkip;
1719 struct {
1720 u8 pn[6];
1721 } ccmp;
1722 struct {
1723 u8 pn[6];
1724 } aes_cmac;
1725 struct {
1726 u8 pn[6];
1727 } aes_gmac;
1728 struct {
1729 u8 pn[6];
1730 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001731 struct {
1732 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1733 u8 seq_len;
1734 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001735 };
1736};
1737
1738/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001739 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1740 *
1741 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1742 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1743 *
1744 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1745 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1746 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1747 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1748 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1749 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1750 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1751 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1752 * key_idx value calculation:
1753 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1754 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1755 */
1756struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1757 u32 cipher;
1758 u16 iftype;
1759 u8 hdr_len;
1760 u8 pn_len;
1761 u8 pn_off;
1762 u8 key_idx_off;
1763 u8 key_idx_mask;
1764 u8 key_idx_shift;
1765 u8 mic_len;
1766};
1767
1768/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001769 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1770 *
1771 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1772 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1773 *
1774 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1775 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1776 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001777enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001778 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001779};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001780
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001781/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001782 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1783 *
1784 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1785 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1786 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1787 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1788 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1789 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1790 */
1791enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1792 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1793 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1794 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1795 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1796 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1797 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1798};
1799
1800/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001801 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1802 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1803 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1804 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1805 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1806 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1807 *
1808 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1809 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1810 */
1811enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1812 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1813 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1814 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1815 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1816};
1817
1818/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001819 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1820 *
1821 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001822 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001823 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1824 */
1825struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1826 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1827 struct {
1828 s8 idx;
1829 u8 count;
1830 u8 count_cts;
1831 u8 count_rts;
1832 u16 flags;
1833 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1834};
1835
1836/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001837 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1838 *
1839 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1840 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1841 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1842 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1843 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001844 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001845 *
1846 * @addr: MAC address
1847 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001848 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001849 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1850 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001851 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001852 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1853 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1854 * Can be modified by driver.
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001855 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1856 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001857 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001858 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001859 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
Emmanuel Grumbachf438ceb2016-10-18 23:12:12 +03001860 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1861 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001862 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001863 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001864 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1865 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1866 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1867 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001868 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001869 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001870 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001871 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1872 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301873 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001874 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1875 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1876 * unlimited.
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001877 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001878 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
Sara Sharonedba6bd2018-09-05 08:06:10 +03001879 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +03001880 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
1881 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001882 */
1883struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02001884 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001885 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1886 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001887 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001888 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001889 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
1890 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001891 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001892 u8 uapsd_queues;
1893 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001894 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001895 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001896 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001897 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001898 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001899 bool tdls_initiator;
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301900 bool mfp;
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001901 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
Johannes Berg57eeb202017-01-13 11:12:01 +01001902
1903 /**
1904 * @max_amsdu_len:
1905 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
1906 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
1907 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1908 *
1909 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1910 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1911 * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1912 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1913 *
1914 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
1915 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
1916 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
1917 */
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001918 u16 max_amsdu_len;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001919 bool support_p2p_ps;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001920 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
Sara Sharonedba6bd2018-09-05 08:06:10 +03001921 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001922
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +03001923 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001924
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001925 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001926 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001927};
1928
1929/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001930 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1931 *
1932 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301933 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001934 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001935 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1936 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1937 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001938enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001939 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1940};
1941
1942/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001943 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1944 *
1945 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1946 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1947 */
1948struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1949 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1950};
1951
1952/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001953 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1954 *
1955 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1956 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +03001957 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
1958 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001959 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001960 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001961 *
1962 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1963 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1964 */
1965struct ieee80211_txq {
1966 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1967 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1968 u8 tid;
1969 u8 ac;
1970
1971 /* must be last */
1972 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1973};
1974
1975/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001976 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1977 *
1978 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1979 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1980 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1981 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1982 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1983 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001984 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1985 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1986 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1987 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1988 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1989 * algorithm.
1990 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1991 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1992 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1993 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1994 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1995 * CCK frames.
1996 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001997 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1998 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1999 * the FCS at the end.
2000 *
2001 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2002 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2003 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2004 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2005 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2006 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002007 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002008 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02002009 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2010 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2011 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2012 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2013 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02002014 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2015 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2016 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2017 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2018 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03002019 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2020 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2021 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05302022 *
2023 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2024 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02002025 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002026 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2027 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2028 *
2029 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2030 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2031 * stack support for dynamic PS.
2032 *
2033 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2034 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02002035 *
2036 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2037 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002038 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05302039 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2040 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2041 * the stack.
2042 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02002043 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002044 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2045 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02002046 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02002047 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2048 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2049 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02002050 *
2051 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2052 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2053 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2054 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2055 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2056 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002057 *
2058 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2059 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2060 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2061 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2062 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2063 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03002064 *
2065 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2066 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2067 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02002068 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02002069 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2070 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2071 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002072 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07002073 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2074 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2075 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2076 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002077 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2078 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2079 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2080 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2081 * supported cipher suites.
2082 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01002083 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2084 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2085 * for frames.
2086 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002087 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2088 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2089 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2090 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02002091 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02002092 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2093 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2094 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02002095 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2096 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2097 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01002098 *
2099 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2100 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03002101 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02002102 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2103 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2104 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2105 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03002106 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2107 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2108 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2109 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02002110 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03002111 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2112 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2113 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02002114 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002115 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002116 *
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002117 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2118 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2119 *
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002120 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2121 * within A-MPDU.
2122 *
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002123 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2124 * for sent beacons.
2125 *
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002126 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2127 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2128 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2129 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2130 *
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002131 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2132 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2133 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2134 * timeout.
2135 *
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002136 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2137 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2138 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002139 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2140 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2141 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2142 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2143 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2144 *
2145 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2146 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2147 *
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302148 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2149 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2150 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2151 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2152 *
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002153 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2154 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2155 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2156 *
Yingying Tange2fb1b82017-10-24 16:51:10 +08002157 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2158 * TDLS links.
2159 *
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02002160 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2161 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2162 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2163 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2164 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2165 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2166 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
Randy Dunlapd1361b32018-04-26 18:17:31 -07002167 *
Ben Caradoc-Davies7c181f42018-03-19 12:57:44 +13002168 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2169 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02002170 *
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +03002171 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2172 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2173 *
Johannes Berg09b4a4f2018-08-31 11:31:17 +03002174 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2175 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2176 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2177 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2178 * See also the documentation for that flag.
2179 *
Sara Sharon0eeb2b62018-09-05 08:06:09 +03002180 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2181 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2182 * TXQs to start with.
2183 *
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002184 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002185 */
2186enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002187 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2188 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2189 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2190 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2191 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2192 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2193 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2194 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2195 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2196 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2197 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2198 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2199 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2200 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2201 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2202 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2203 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2204 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2205 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2206 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2207 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2208 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2209 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2210 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2211 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2212 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2213 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2214 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2215 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002216 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002217 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002218 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002219 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002220 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002221 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002222 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2223 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302224 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002225 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
Yingying Tange2fb1b82017-10-24 16:51:10 +08002226 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02002227 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
Ben Caradoc-Davies7c181f42018-03-19 12:57:44 +13002228 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +03002229 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
Johannes Berg09b4a4f2018-08-31 11:31:17 +03002230 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
Sara Sharon0eeb2b62018-09-05 08:06:09 +03002231 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002232
2233 /* keep last, obviously */
2234 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002235};
2236
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002237/**
2238 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002239 *
2240 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2241 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2242 *
2243 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2244 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2245 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002246 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2247 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002248 *
2249 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2250 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002251 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2252 * along with this structure.
2253 *
2254 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2255 *
2256 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2257 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2258 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002259 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2260 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002261 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02002262 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002263 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002264 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002265 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002266 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002267 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002268 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02002269 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2270 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2271 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002272 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2273 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2274 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002275 *
2276 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2277 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002278 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2279 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002280 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2281 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002282 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2283 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002284 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002285 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2286 * can handle.
2287 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2288 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002289 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002290 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002291 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2292 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2293 * aggregation.
2294 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2295 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2296 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002297 *
2298 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03002299 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2300 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2301 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2302 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2303 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002304 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002305 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2306 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2307 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002308 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2309 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002310 *
2311 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2312 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002313 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002314 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002315 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002316 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2317 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002318 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002319 *
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03002320 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2321 *
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002322 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2323 * 'units_pos' member is set to a non-negative value it must be set to
2324 * a combination of a IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2325 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value, and then the timestamp
2326 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2327 * device_timestamp. If the 'accuracy' member is non-negative, it's put
2328 * into the accuracy radiotap field and the accuracy known flag is set.
2329 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002330 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002331 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2332 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002333 *
2334 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2335 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2336 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2337 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2338 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2339 * neither enabled.
2340 *
2341 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2342 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2343 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002344 *
2345 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2346 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2347 * supported by HW.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002348 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2349 * device.
Wen Gong70e53662018-08-08 18:40:01 +08002350 *
2351 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2352 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2353 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002354 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002355struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002356 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002357 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002358 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002359 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002360 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002361 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002362 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002363 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002364 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002365 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002366 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002367 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002368 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002369 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002370 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002371 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002372 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03002373 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2374 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002375 u8 max_tx_fragments;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002376 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002377 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002378 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002379 struct {
2380 int units_pos;
2381 s16 accuracy;
2382 } radiotap_timestamp;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002383 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002384 u8 uapsd_queues;
2385 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002386 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2387 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002388 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
Wen Gong70e53662018-08-08 18:40:01 +08002389 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002390};
2391
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002392static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2393 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2394{
2395 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2396}
2397#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2398
2399static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2400 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2401{
2402 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2403}
2404#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2405
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002406/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002407 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2408 *
2409 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2410 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2411 */
2412struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2413 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2414
2415 /* Keep last */
2416 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2417};
2418
2419/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002420 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2421 *
2422 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2423 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2424 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2425 * @status: channel-switch response status
2426 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2427 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2428 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2429 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2430 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2431 */
2432struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2433 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2434 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2435 u8 action_code;
2436 u32 status;
2437 u32 timestamp;
2438 u16 switch_time;
2439 u16 switch_timeout;
2440 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2441 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2442};
2443
2444/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002445 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2446 *
2447 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2448 *
2449 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2450 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2451 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2452 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2453 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002454 *
2455 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002456 */
2457struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2458
2459/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002460 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2461 *
2462 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2463 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2464 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002465static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2466{
2467 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2468}
2469
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002470/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002471 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002472 *
2473 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2474 * @addr: the address to set
2475 */
Bjorn Andersson538dc902015-12-24 00:33:26 -08002476static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002477{
2478 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2479}
2480
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002481static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2482ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002483 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002484{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002485 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002486 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002487 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002488}
2489
2490static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2491ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002492 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002493{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002494 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002495 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002496 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002497}
2498
2499static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2500ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002501 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002502{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002503 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002504 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002505 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002506}
2507
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002508/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002509 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2510 * @hw: the hardware
2511 * @skb: the skb
2512 *
2513 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2514 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2515 */
2516void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2517
2518/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002519 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002520 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002521 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2522 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2523 *
2524 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2525 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002526 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2527 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2528 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002529 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2530 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2531 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002532 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2533 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2534 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2535 *
2536 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2537 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2538 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2539 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2540 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002541 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2542 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2543 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2544 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2545 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002546 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2547 *
2548 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2549 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2550 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2551 * based on the receive flags.
2552 *
2553 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2554 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2555 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2556 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002557 *
2558 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2559 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2560 * handler.
2561 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002562 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002563 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2564 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002565 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002566 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002567 *
2568 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2569 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2570 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Alexander Wetzel62872a92018-08-31 15:00:38 +02002571 *
2572 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2573 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to to following
2574 * requirements:
2575 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2576 mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2577 completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2578 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2579 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2580 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2581 encrypted with the new key and
2582 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2583 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002584 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002585
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002586/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002587 * DOC: Powersave support
2588 *
2589 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2590 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002591 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2592 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2593 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2594 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2595 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2596 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2597 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2598 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002599 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002600 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2601 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2602 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002603 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2604 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002605 *
2606 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2607 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2608 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002609 *
2610 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2611 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2612 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2613 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002614 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2615 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002616 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002617 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002618 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2619 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2620 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2621 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2622 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2623 * periods.
2624 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002625 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002626 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2627 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2628 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2629 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2630 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2631 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2632 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2633 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2634 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2635 *
2636 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002637 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002638 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002639 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2640 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2641 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2642 *
2643 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2644 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002645 */
2646
2647/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002648 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2649 *
2650 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002651 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002652 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2653 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2654 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2655 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2656 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2657 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002658 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2659 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002660 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2661 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2662 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2663 *
2664 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2665 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2666 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2667 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2668 *
2669 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2670 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2671 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2672 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002673 *
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002674 * - a list of information element IDs
2675 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2676 *
2677 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2678 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2679 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2680 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2681 * vendor information elements.
2682 *
2683 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2684 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2685 *
2686 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2687 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2688 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2689 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2690 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2691 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2692 *
2693 *
2694 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2695 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2696 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2697 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2698 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2699 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2700 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2701 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2702 *
2703 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2704 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2705 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002706 */
2707
2708/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002709 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2710 *
2711 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2712 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2713 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2714 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2715 *
2716 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2717 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2718 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2719 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2720 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2721 * hardware flags.
2722 *
2723 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2724 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2725 * turned off otherwise.
2726 *
2727 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2728 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2729 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2730 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2731 */
2732
2733/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002734 * DOC: Frame filtering
2735 *
2736 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2737 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2738 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2739 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2740 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2741 *
2742 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2743 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2744 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2745 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002746 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2747 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2748 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2749 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2750 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2751 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2752 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002753 *
2754 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2755 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2756 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2757 * or dropped.
2758 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002759 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2760 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2761 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2762 * the flag, but not clear it.
2763 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2764 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2765 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2766 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2767 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2768 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2769 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2770 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002771 */
2772
2773/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002774 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2775 *
2776 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2777 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2778 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2779 *
2780 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2781 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2782 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2783 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2784 * the driver code.
2785 *
2786 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2787 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2788 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2789 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2790 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2791 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2792 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2793 *
2794 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2795 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2796 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2797 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2798 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2799 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2800 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2801 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2802 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2803 * @sta_notify callback.
2804 *
2805 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2806 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2807 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2808 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2809 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2810 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2811 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002812 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002813 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2814 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2815 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2816 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2817 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2818 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2819 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002820 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2821 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2822 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002823 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2824 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2825 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2826 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2827 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2828 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2829 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2830 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2831 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2832 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2833 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2834 *
2835 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2836 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2837 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2838 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2839 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2840 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2841 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2842 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2843 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2844 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002845 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002846 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2847 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2848 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2849 *
2850 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2851 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2852 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2853 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2854 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002855 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002856 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2857 *
2858 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2859 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2860 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2861 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002862 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002863 *
2864 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2865 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2866 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2867 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002868 */
2869
2870/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002871 * DOC: HW queue control
2872 *
2873 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2874 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2875 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2876 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2877 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2878 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2879 *
2880 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2881 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2882 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2883 *
2884 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2885 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2886 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2887 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2888 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2889 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2890 * the hardware queue.
2891 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2892 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2893 *
2894 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2895 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2896 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2897 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2898 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2899 *
2900 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2901 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2902 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2903 * off-channel queue: 9
2904 *
2905 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2906 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2907 *
2908 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2909 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2910 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2911 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2912 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2913 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2914 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2915 *
2916 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2917 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2918 *
2919 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2920 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2921 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2922 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2923 */
2924
2925/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002926 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2927 *
2928 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2929 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2930 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2931 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2932 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002933 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2934 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2935 * multicast address.
2936 *
2937 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2938 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2939 *
2940 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2941 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2942 *
2943 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2944 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2945 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2946 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2947 * honour this flag if possible.
2948 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002949 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2950 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002951 *
2952 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002953 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002954 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002955 *
2956 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002957 */
2958enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002959 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2960 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2961 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2962 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2963 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2964 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002965 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002966 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002967};
2968
2969/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002970 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2971 *
2972 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2973 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002974 *
2975 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2976 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002977 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002978 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2979 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002980 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2981 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2982 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002983 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002984 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2985 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2986 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2987 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2988 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2989 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2990 * session is gone and removes the station.
2991 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2992 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2993 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2994 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002995 */
2996enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2997 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2998 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002999 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02003000 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3001 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3002 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01003003 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003004};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003005
3006/**
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003007 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3008 *
3009 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3010 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3011 * @tid: tid of the BA session
3012 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3013 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3014 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3015 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3016 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3017 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3018 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3019 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3020 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3021 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3022 */
3023struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3024 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3025 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3026 u16 tid;
3027 u16 ssn;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03003028 u16 buf_size;
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003029 bool amsdu;
3030 u16 timeout;
3031};
3032
3033/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003034 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3035 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003036 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3037 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003038 */
3039enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3040 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003041 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003042};
3043
3044/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003045 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3046 *
3047 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01003048 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3049 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3050 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003051 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02003052 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3053 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3054 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01003055 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3056 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003057 */
3058enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3059 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
3060 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02003061 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01003062 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003063};
3064
3065/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003066 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3067 *
3068 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3069 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3070 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
3071 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3072 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3073 *
3074 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3075 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3076 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
3077 */
3078enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3079 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3080 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3081};
3082
3083/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003084 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
3085 *
3086 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3087 * reconfiguration type was completed.
3088 *
3089 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3090 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3091 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3092 * of wowlan configuration)
3093 */
3094enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3095 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3096 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3097};
3098
3099/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003100 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3101 *
3102 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3103 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3104 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3105 *
3106 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3107 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3108 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02003109 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01003110 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01003111 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003112 *
3113 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3114 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3115 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3116 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3117 * or zero.
3118 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3119 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3120 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003121 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003122 *
3123 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3124 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3125 * it must turn off frame reception.)
3126 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04003127 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3128 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003129 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003130 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003131 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3132 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3133 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3134 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3135 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02003136 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3137 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3138 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3139 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003140 *
3141 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3142 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3143 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3144 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3145 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3146 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02003147 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3148 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3149 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3150 * in suspend().
3151 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003152 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04003153 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003154 * and @stop must be implemented.
3155 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3156 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3157 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3158 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3159 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003160 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003161 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003162 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3163 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3164 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3165 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3166 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3167 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003168 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3169 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3170 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3171 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3172 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3173 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3174 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003175 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003176 *
3177 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3178 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003179 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003180 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003181 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003182 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3183 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3184 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3185 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3186 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003187 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3188 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003189 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003190 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3191 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3192 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3193 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003194 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3195 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003196 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003197 *
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003198 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3199 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3200 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3201 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3202 * which flags are changed.
3203 * This callback can sleep.
3204 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07003205 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003206 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003207 *
3208 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003209 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3210 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003211 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003212 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003213 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003214 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003215 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3216 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3217 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02003218 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003219 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003220 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3221 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3222 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3223 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3224 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3225 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003226 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3227 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3228 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3229 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003230 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003231 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02003232 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3233 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a54b2009-04-01 11:58:36 +02003234 * that power save is disabled.
3235 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3236 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3237 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3238 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3239 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3240 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3241 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003242 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003243 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003244 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3245 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3246 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3247 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3248 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3249 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3250 * The callback can sleep.
3251 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003252 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3253 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3254 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3255 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3256 *
3257 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003258 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003259 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003260 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3261 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003262 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3263 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3264 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003265 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003266 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3267 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3268 * this notification.
3269 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003270 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003271 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3272 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003273 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003274 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003275 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3276 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3277 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003278 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003279 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003280 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03003281 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3282 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3283 * should be set as well.
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003284 * The callback can sleep.
3285 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003286 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003287 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003288 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003289 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3290 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3291 *
3292 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003293 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3294 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3295 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3296 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3297 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003298 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303299 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3300 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
Johannes Bergc7e9dbc2016-09-14 10:03:00 +02003301 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3302 * callback can sleep.
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303303 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003304 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003305 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3306 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3307 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01003308 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003309 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3310 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3311 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3312 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003313 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3314 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3315 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3316 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3317 * The callback can sleep.
3318 *
3319 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3320 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3321 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3322 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3323 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003324 * The callback can sleep.
3325 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003326 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3327 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3328 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3329 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3330 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3331 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3332 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003333 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3334 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3335 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003336 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003337 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3338 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3339 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3340 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3341 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3342 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3343 * The callback can sleep.
3344 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003345 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02003346 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003347 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003348 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003349 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003350 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003351 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003352 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003353 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003354 *
3355 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02003356 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003357 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003358 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003359 *
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003360 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3361 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3362 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3363 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3364 * The callback can sleep.
3365 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003366 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3367 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3368 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3369 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003370 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003371 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003372 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3373 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3374 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003375 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003376 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02003377 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003378 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3379 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003380 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3381 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3382 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003383 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003384 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003385 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3386 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003387 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3388 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3389 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003390 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003391 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3392 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003393 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003394 *
3395 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003396 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3397 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3398 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3399 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003400 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003401 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003402 *
3403 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3404 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3405 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3406 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003407 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003408 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3409 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3410 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3411 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3412 *
3413 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003414 *
3415 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3416 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3417 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3418 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3419 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3420 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003421 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003422 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3423 * must be accepted in this case.
3424 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003425 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3426 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003427 *
3428 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3429 *
3430 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303431 *
3432 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3433 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303434 *
3435 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3436 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3437 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003438 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3439 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003440 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003441 *
3442 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3443 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3444 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3445 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003446 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003447 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3448 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3449 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3450 * more-data bit must always be set.
3451 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3452 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003453 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3454 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3455 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3456 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3457 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3458 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003459 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3460 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3461 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003462 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3463 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003464 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003465 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003466 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003467 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3468 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3469 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003470 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003471 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3472 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3473 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3474 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003475 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003476 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003477 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3478 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3479 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003480 *
3481 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3482 *
3483 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3484 *
3485 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3486 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3487 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003488 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3489 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3490 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3491 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3492 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3493 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3494 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3495 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3496 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02003497 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3498 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3499 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003500 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3501 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
Ilan Peerd4e36e52018-04-20 13:49:25 +03003502 * If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3503 * duration for which the operation is requested.
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003504 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003505 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003506 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3507 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3508 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3509 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3510 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3511 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3512 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3513 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3514 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003515 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303516 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003517 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303518 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003519 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3520 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3521 * channel context with different settings
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303522 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003523 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3524 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303525 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003526 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3527 * unbound from vif.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303528 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003529 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3530 * another, as specified in the list of
3531 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3532 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303533 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003534 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003535 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3536 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3537 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3538 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3539 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3540 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3541 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003542 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003543 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3544 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3545 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3546 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3547 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003548 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003549 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3550 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3551 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003552 *
3553 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3554 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3555 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003556 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003557 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3558 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003559 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003560 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003561 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3562 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003563 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3564 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
Masahiro Yamada9332ef92017-02-27 14:28:47 -08003565 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003566 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003567 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3568 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3569 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003570 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003571 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3572 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3573 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3574 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003575 *
3576 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3577 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3578 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003579 *
3580 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3581 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003582 *
3583 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3584 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3585 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3586 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3587 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3588 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3589 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3590 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3591 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003592 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3593 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3594 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3595 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3596 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3597 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3598 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003599 *
3600 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003601 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3602 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3603 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3604 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003605 *
3606 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3607 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003608 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3609 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3610 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3611 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3612 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3613 * changed parameters.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003614 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3615 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3616 * this call.
3617 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3618 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3619 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
Sara Sharon9739fe22018-09-05 08:06:11 +03003620 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3621 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3622 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3623 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapubc847972018-10-03 20:19:20 -07003624 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3625 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003626 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003627struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003628 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3629 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3630 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003631 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003632 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003633#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3634 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3635 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003636 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003637#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003638 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003639 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003640 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3641 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003642 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003643 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003644 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003645 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003646 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3647 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3648 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3649 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003650
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003651 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3652 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3653
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003654 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003655 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003656 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3657 unsigned int changed_flags,
3658 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003659 u64 multicast);
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003660 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3661 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3662 unsigned int filter_flags,
3663 unsigned int changed_flags);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003664 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3665 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003666 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003667 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003668 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003669 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003670 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3671 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3672 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3673 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003674 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3675 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3676 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003677 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3678 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003679 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003680 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003681 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3682 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003683 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3684 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3685 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003686 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003687 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003688 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003689 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3690 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3691 const u8 *mac_addr);
3692 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3693 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003694 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3695 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003696 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3697 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3698 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003699 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003700 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003701 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3702 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3703 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3704 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303705#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3706 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3707 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3708 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3709 struct dentry *dir);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303710#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003711 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003712 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003713 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3714 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3715 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3716 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003717 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3718 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3719 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003720 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3721 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3722 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3723 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003724 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3725 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3726 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003727 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3728 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3729 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3730 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003731 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003732 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003733 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003734 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3735 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3736 u64 tsf);
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003737 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3738 s64 offset);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003739 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003740 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg57eeb202017-01-13 11:12:01 +01003741
3742 /**
3743 * @ampdu_action:
3744 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3745 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3746 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3747 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3748 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3749 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3750 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3751 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3752 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3753 *
3754 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3755 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3756 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
3757 *
3758 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3759 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3760 *
3761 * - ``TX: 1 or``
3762 * - ``TX: 18 or``
3763 * - ``TX: 81``
3764 *
3765 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3766 *
3767 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3768 * The callback can sleep.
3769 */
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003770 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003771 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003772 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003773 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3774 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003775 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003776 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003777#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003778 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3779 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003780 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3781 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3782 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003783#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003784 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3785 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003786 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003787 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003788 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003789 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3790 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003791
3792 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003793 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003794 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003795 int duration,
3796 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003797 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003798 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3799 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3800 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303801 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303802 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3803 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003804 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3805 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3806 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003807
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003808 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3809 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3810 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3811 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3812 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003813 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3814 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3815 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3816 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3817 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003818
3819 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3820 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3821 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3822 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3823 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3824 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3825 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3826 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003827
3828 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Ilan Peerd4e36e52018-04-20 13:49:25 +03003829 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3830 u16 duration);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003831
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003832 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3833 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3834
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003835 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3836 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3837 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3838 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3839 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3840 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3841 u32 changed);
3842 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3843 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3844 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3845 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3846 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3847 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003848 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3849 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3850 int n_vifs,
3851 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003852
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003853 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3854 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003855
3856#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3857 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3858 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3859 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3860#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003861 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3862 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3863 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003864 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3865 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3866 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003867
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003868 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3869 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3870
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003871 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3872 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Maxim Altshul2439ca02016-08-04 15:43:04 +03003873 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3874 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003875 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3876 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003877
3878 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3879 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3880 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3881 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003882 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003883 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3884 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3885 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003886 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3887 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3888 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003889
Johannes Berge7881bd52017-12-19 10:11:54 +01003890 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3891 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003892 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003893
3894 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3895 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3896 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
3897 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3898 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003899 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3900 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3901 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003902 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3903 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3904 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
3905 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3906 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3907 u8 instance_id);
Sara Sharon9739fe22018-09-05 08:06:11 +03003908 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3909 struct sk_buff *head,
3910 struct sk_buff *skb);
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapubc847972018-10-03 20:19:20 -07003911 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3912 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3913 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003914};
3915
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003916/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003917 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3918 *
3919 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3920 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3921 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3922 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3923 * @priv_data_len.
3924 *
3925 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3926 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3927 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3928 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3929 *
3930 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3931 */
3932struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3933 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3934 const char *requested_name);
3935
3936/**
3937 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003938 *
3939 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3940 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3941 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3942 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3943 * @priv_data_len.
3944 *
3945 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3946 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003947 *
3948 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003949 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003950static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003951struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003952 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3953{
3954 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3955}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003956
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003957/**
3958 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3959 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003960 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3961 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3962 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003963 *
3964 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003965 *
3966 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003967 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003968int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3969
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003970/**
3971 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3972 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3973 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3974 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3975 */
3976struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3977 int throughput;
3978 int blink_time;
3979};
3980
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003981/**
3982 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3983 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3984 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3985 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3986 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3987 */
3988enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3989 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3990 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3991 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3992};
3993
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003994#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003995const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3996const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3997const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3998const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3999const char *
4000__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4001 unsigned int flags,
4002 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4003 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004004#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004005/**
4006 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4007 *
4008 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4009 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4010 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4011 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4012 *
4013 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004014 *
4015 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004016 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02004017static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004018{
4019#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4020 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4021#else
4022 return NULL;
4023#endif
4024}
4025
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004026/**
4027 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4028 *
4029 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4030 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4031 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4032 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4033 *
4034 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004035 *
4036 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004037 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02004038static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004039{
4040#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4041 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4042#else
4043 return NULL;
4044#endif
4045}
4046
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01004047/**
4048 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4049 *
4050 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4051 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4052 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4053 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4054 *
4055 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004056 *
4057 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01004058 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02004059static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02004060{
4061#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4062 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4063#else
4064 return NULL;
4065#endif
4066}
4067
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01004068/**
4069 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4070 *
4071 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4072 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4073 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4074 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4075 *
4076 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004077 *
4078 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01004079 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02004080static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01004081{
4082#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4083 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4084#else
4085 return NULL;
4086#endif
4087}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02004088
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004089/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01004090 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4091 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01004092 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01004093 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4094 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4095 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004096 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4097 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4098 *
4099 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01004100 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02004101static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01004102ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01004103 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4104 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4105{
4106#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01004107 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01004108 blink_table_len);
4109#else
4110 return NULL;
4111#endif
4112}
4113
4114/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004115 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4116 *
4117 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4118 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4119 *
4120 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4121 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004122void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4123
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004124/**
4125 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4126 *
4127 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4128 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004129 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004130 *
4131 * @hw: the hardware to free
4132 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004133void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4134
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02004135/**
4136 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4137 *
4138 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4139 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4140 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4141 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4142 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4143 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4144 *
4145 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4146 */
4147void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4148
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01004149/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004150 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004151 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004152 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4153 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4154 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4155 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4156 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4157 *
4158 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4159 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4160 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4161 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4162 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4163 *
4164 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4165 *
4166 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004167 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004168 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4169 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004170 */
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004171void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4172 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004173
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004174/**
4175 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4176 *
4177 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b3f2010-03-29 17:35:07 +08004178 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4179 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4180 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4181 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004182 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004183 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004184 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4185 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004186 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4187 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004188 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004189 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02004190 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004191 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4192 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004193 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004194static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4195{
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004196 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004197}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004198
4199/**
4200 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4201 *
4202 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004203 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4204 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004205 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004206 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4207 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004208 *
4209 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4210 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004211 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02004212void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004213
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004214/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004215 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4216 *
4217 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4218 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4219 *
4220 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004221 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4222 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004223 *
4224 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4225 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4226 */
4227static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4228 struct sk_buff *skb)
4229{
4230 local_bh_disable();
4231 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4232 local_bh_enable();
4233}
4234
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004235/**
4236 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4237 *
4238 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4239 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4240 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4241 *
4242 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4243 *
4244 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4245 * each other.
4246 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004247 * @sta: currently connected sta
4248 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004249 *
4250 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004251 */
4252int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4253
4254/**
4255 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4256 * (in process context)
4257 *
4258 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4259 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4260 * applies.
4261 *
4262 * @sta: currently connected sta
4263 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004264 *
4265 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004266 */
4267static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4268 bool start)
4269{
4270 int ret;
4271
4272 local_bh_disable();
4273 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4274 local_bh_enable();
4275
4276 return ret;
4277}
4278
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004279/**
4280 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4281 * @sta: currently connected station
4282 *
4283 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4284 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4285 * connected station was received.
4286 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4287 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4288 * be serialized.
4289 */
4290void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4291
4292/**
4293 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4294 * @sta: currently connected station
4295 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4296 *
4297 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4298 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4299 * from a connected station was received.
4300 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4301 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4302 * serialized.
Emmanuel Grumbach0aa419e2016-10-18 23:12:10 +03004303 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4304 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4305 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4306 * checks.
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004307 */
4308void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4309
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004310/*
4311 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4312 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4313 */
Felix Fietkau651b9922018-02-10 13:20:34 +01004314#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4)
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004315
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004316/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004317 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07004318 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004319 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4320 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004321 *
4322 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004323 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4324 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004325 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004326 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4327 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4328 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4329 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4330 *
4331 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4332 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4333 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4334 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4335 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4336 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4337 *
4338 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4339 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4340 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4341 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4342 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004343 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004344void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4345 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004346
4347/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004348 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4349 *
4350 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4351 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4352 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4353 *
4354 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4355 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4356 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4357 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4358 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4359 */
4360void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4361 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4362 struct sk_buff *skb,
4363 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4364 int max_rates);
4365
4366/**
Toke Høiland-Jørgensen484a54c2017-04-06 11:38:26 +02004367 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4368 *
4369 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4370 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4371 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4372 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4373 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4374 * slow stations to starve).
4375 *
4376 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4377 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4378 */
4379void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4380 u32 thr);
4381
4382/**
Anilkumar Kollif8252e72018-10-11 18:15:03 +05304383 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4384 *
4385 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4386 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4387 * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4388 *
4389 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4390 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4391 * @info: tx status information
4392 */
4393void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4394 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4395 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4396
4397/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004398 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4399 *
4400 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4401 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4402 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4403 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004404 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4405 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004406 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004407 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4408 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004409 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004410 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4411 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004412 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004413void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004414 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004415
4416/**
Felix Fietkau5fe49a92017-04-26 17:11:37 +02004417 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4418 *
4419 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4420 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4421 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4422 *
4423 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4424 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4425 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4426 *
4427 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4428 * @status: tx status information
4429 */
4430void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4431 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4432
4433/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004434 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4435 *
4436 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4437 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4438 * specific skbs.
4439 *
4440 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4441 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4442 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4443 *
4444 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4445 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4446 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4447 * @info: tx status information
4448 */
Felix Fietkau5fe49a92017-04-26 17:11:37 +02004449static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4450 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4451 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4452{
4453 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4454 .sta = sta,
4455 .info = info,
4456 };
4457
4458 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4459}
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004460
4461/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004462 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4463 *
4464 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4465 *
4466 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4467 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4468 * for a single hardware.
4469 *
4470 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4471 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4472 */
4473static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4474 struct sk_buff *skb)
4475{
4476 local_bh_disable();
4477 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4478 local_bh_enable();
4479}
4480
4481/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004482 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004483 *
4484 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4485 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4486 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004487 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4488 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004489 *
4490 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4491 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004492 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004493void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004494 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004495
4496/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004497 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4498 *
4499 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4500 * connected STA.
4501 *
4502 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4503 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4504 */
4505void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4506
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004507#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4508
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004509/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004510 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4511 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4512 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03004513 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4514 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4515 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004516 */
4517struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4518 u16 tim_offset;
4519 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004520
4521 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004522};
4523
4524/**
4525 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4526 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4527 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4528 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4529 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4530 *
4531 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4532 * obtain the beacon template.
4533 *
4534 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4535 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004536 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4537 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004538 *
4539 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4540 *
4541 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4542 */
4543struct sk_buff *
4544ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4545 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4546 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4547
4548/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004549 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4550 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004551 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004552 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4553 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4554 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4555 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4556 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4557 *
4558 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004559 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004560 *
4561 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4562 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004563 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4564 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004565 *
4566 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004567 *
4568 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004569 */
4570struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4571 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4572 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4573
4574/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004575 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4576 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004577 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004578 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004579 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004580 *
4581 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004582 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004583static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4584 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4585{
4586 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4587}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004588
4589/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004590 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4591 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4592 *
4593 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4594 * This function is called implicitly when
4595 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4596 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4597 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4598 *
4599 * Return: new csa counter value
4600 */
4601u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4602
4603/**
Gregory Greenman03737002018-04-20 13:49:24 +03004604 * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter
4605 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4606 * @counter: the new value for the counter
4607 *
4608 * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be
4609 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4610 *
4611 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(),
4612 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4613 */
4614void ieee80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4615
4616/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004617 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4618 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4619 *
4620 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004621 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004622 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4623 */
4624void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4625
4626/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004627 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004628 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4629 *
4630 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4631 */
4632bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4633
4634
4635/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004636 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4637 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4638 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4639 *
4640 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4641 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4642 *
4643 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004644 *
4645 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004646 */
4647struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4648 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4649
4650/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004651 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4652 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4653 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4654 *
4655 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4656 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4657 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4658 *
4659 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4660 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004661 *
4662 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004663 */
4664struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4665 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4666
4667/**
4668 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4669 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4670 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg7b6ddea2017-11-21 14:46:08 +01004671 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4672 * if at all possible
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004673 *
4674 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4675 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4676 * BSSID and address is used.
4677 *
Johannes Berg7b6ddea2017-11-21 14:46:08 +01004678 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4679 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4680 *
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004681 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4682 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004683 *
4684 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004685 */
4686struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg7b6ddea2017-11-21 14:46:08 +01004687 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4688 bool qos_ok);
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004689
4690/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004691 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4692 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004693 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004694 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4695 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004696 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004697 *
4698 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4699 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004700 *
4701 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004702 */
4703struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004704 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004705 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004706 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004707
4708/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004709 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4710 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004711 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004712 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4713 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004714 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004715 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4716 *
4717 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4718 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4719 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4720 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4721 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004722void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004723 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004724 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004725 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4726
4727/**
4728 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4729 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004730 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004731 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004732 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004733 *
4734 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4735 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4736 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004737 *
4738 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004739 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004740__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4741 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004742 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004743
4744/**
4745 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4746 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004747 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004748 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4749 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004750 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004751 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4752 *
4753 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4754 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4755 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4756 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4757 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004758void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4759 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004760 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004761 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004762 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4763
4764/**
4765 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4766 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004767 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004768 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004769 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004770 *
4771 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4772 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4773 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004774 *
4775 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004776 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004777__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4778 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004779 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004780 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004781
4782/**
4783 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4784 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004785 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004786 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004787 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004788 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004789 *
4790 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4791 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004792 *
4793 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004794 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004795__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4796 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02004797 enum nl80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004798 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004799 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004800
4801/**
4802 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4803 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004804 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004805 *
4806 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4807 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4808 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4809 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004810 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4811 *
4812 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4813 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004814 *
4815 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4816 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4817 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4818 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4819 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4820 * use common code for all beacons.
4821 */
4822struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004823ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004824
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004825/**
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004826 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4827 *
4828 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4829 *
4830 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4831 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4832 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4833 */
4834void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4835 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4836
4837/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004838 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004839 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004840 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4841 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004842 *
4843 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004844 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4845 * with this P1K
4846 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004847 */
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004848static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4849 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4850{
4851 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4852 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4853 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4854
4855 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4856}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004857
4858/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004859 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4860 *
4861 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4862 * and transmitter address.
4863 *
4864 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4865 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4866 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4867 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4868 */
4869void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4870 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4871
4872/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004873 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4874 *
4875 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4876 * in the packet.
4877 *
4878 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4879 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4880 * encrypted with this key
4881 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4882 */
4883void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4884 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004885
4886/**
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02004887 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
4888 *
4889 * @pos: start of crypto header
4890 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4891 * @pn: PN to add
4892 *
4893 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
4894 * the packet payload)
4895 *
4896 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
4897 * point to the crypto header)
4898 */
4899u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
4900
4901/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004902 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4903 *
4904 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004905 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004906 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4907 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4908 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4909 *
4910 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4911 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4912 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4913 *
4914 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4915 * can be done concurrently.
4916 */
4917void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4918 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4919
4920/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004921 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4922 *
4923 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004924 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004925 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4926 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4927 * @seq: new sequence data
4928 *
4929 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4930 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4931 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4932 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4933 *
4934 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4935 * can be done concurrently.
4936 */
4937void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4938 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4939
4940/**
4941 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4942 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4943 *
4944 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4945 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4946 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4947 *
4948 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4949 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4950 */
4951void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4952
4953/**
4954 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4955 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4956 * @keyconf: new key data
4957 *
4958 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4959 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4960 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4961 *
4962 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4963 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4964 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4965 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4966 *
4967 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4968 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4969 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4970 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4971 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4972 * of the reconfiguration.
4973 *
4974 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4975 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4976 *
4977 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4978 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4979 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4980 * the key that's being replaced.
4981 */
4982struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4983ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4984 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4985
4986/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004987 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4988 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4989 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4990 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4991 * @gfp: allocation flags
4992 */
4993void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4994 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4995
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004996/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004997 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4998 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4999 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5000 *
5001 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5002 */
5003void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5004
5005/**
5006 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5007 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5008 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5009 *
5010 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5011 */
5012void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5013
5014/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03005015 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5016 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5017 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5018 *
5019 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005020 *
5021 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03005022 */
5023
5024int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5025
5026/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005027 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5028 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5029 *
5030 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5031 */
5032void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5033
5034/**
5035 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5036 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5037 *
5038 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5039 */
5040void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5041
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04005042/**
5043 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5044 *
5045 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5046 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02005047 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5048 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04005049 *
5050 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03005051 * @info: information about the completed scan
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04005052 */
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03005053void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5054 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005055
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01005056/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03005057 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5058 *
5059 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5060 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5061 *
5062 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5063 */
5064void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5065
5066/**
5067 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5068 *
5069 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5070 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5071 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5072 * while associating, for instance.
5073 *
5074 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5075 */
5076void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5077
5078/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005079 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5080 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5081 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5082 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5083 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5084 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5085 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5086 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02005087 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005088 */
5089enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5090 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
5091 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02005092 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005093};
5094
5095/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02005096 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5097 *
5098 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5099 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5100 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5101 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5102 *
5103 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5104 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5105 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5106 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5107 */
5108void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5109 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5110 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5111 void *data);
5112
5113/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07005114 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01005115 *
5116 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5117 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005118 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5119 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5120 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005121 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01005122 *
5123 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005124 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005125 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01005126 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5127 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02005128static inline void
5129ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5130 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5131 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5132 void *data)
5133{
5134 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5135 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5136 iterator, data);
5137}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01005138
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005139/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005140 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5141 *
5142 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5143 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5144 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5145 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005146 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005147 *
5148 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005149 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005150 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5151 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5152 */
5153void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005154 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005155 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5156 u8 *mac,
5157 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5158 void *data);
5159
5160/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02005161 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5162 *
5163 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5164 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5165 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5166 *
5167 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5168 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5169 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5170 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5171 */
5172void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5173 u32 iter_flags,
5174 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5175 u8 *mac,
5176 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5177 void *data);
5178
5179/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03005180 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5181 *
5182 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5183 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5184 * function for them.
5185 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5186 *
5187 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5188 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5189 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5190 */
5191void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5192 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5193 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5194 void *data);
5195/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04005196 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5197 *
5198 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5199 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5200 *
5201 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5202 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5203 */
5204void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5205
5206/**
5207 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5208 *
5209 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5210 * workqueue.
5211 *
5212 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5213 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5214 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5215 */
5216void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5217 struct delayed_work *dwork,
5218 unsigned long delay);
5219
5220/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005221 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005222 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005223 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05305224 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07005225 *
5226 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005227 *
5228 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5229 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5230 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5231 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05305232int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5233 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005234
5235/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005236 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005237 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005238 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5239 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5240 *
5241 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02005242 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5243 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005244 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005245void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005246 u16 tid);
5247
5248/**
5249 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005250 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005251 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07005252 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02005253 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005254 *
5255 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5256 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5257 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5258 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02005259int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005260
5261/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005262 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005263 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005264 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5265 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5266 *
5267 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02005268 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5269 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005270 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005271void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005272 u16 tid);
5273
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07005274/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005275 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5276 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005277 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005278 * @addr: station's address
5279 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005280 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5281 *
5282 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005283 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5284 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005285struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005286 const u8 *addr);
5287
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005288/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005289 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005290 *
5291 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005292 * @addr: remote station's address
5293 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005294 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005295 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5296 *
5297 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005298 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5299 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005300 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5301 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5302 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5303 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5304 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5305 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5306 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005307 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005308 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005309 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005310struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5311 const u8 *addr,
5312 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005313
5314/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01005315 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5316 * @hw: the hardware
5317 * @pubsta: the station
5318 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5319 *
5320 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5321 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5322 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5323 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5324 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5325 *
5326 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5327 * manner.
5328 *
5329 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5330 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5331 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5332 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5333 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5334 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5335 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5336 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5337 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5338 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5339 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5340 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5341 * woke up while blocked or not.
5342 */
5343void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5344 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5345
5346/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005347 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5348 * @pubsta: the station
5349 *
5350 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5351 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5352 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5353 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5354 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005355 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5356 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5357 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5358 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5359 *
5360 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5361 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5362 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5363 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005364 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005365void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005366
5367/**
Emmanuel Grumbach0ead2512015-11-17 10:24:36 +02005368 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5369 * @pubsta: the station
5370 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5371 *
5372 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5373 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5374 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5375 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5376 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5377 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5378 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5379 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5380 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5381 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5382 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5383 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5384 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5385 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5386 */
5387void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5388
5389/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005390 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5391 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5392 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5393 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5394 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5395 *
5396 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5397 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5398 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5399 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5400 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5401 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02005402 *
5403 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5404 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5405 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005406 */
5407void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5408 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5409 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5410 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5411 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5412 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5413 void *data),
5414 void *iter_data);
5415
5416/**
Eliad Pelleref044762015-11-17 10:24:37 +02005417 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5418 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5419 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5420 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5421 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5422 *
5423 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5424 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5425 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5426 * in removal process will be skipped.
5427 *
5428 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5429 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5430 */
5431void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5432 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5433 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5434 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5435 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5436 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5437 void *data),
5438 void *iter_data);
5439
5440/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005441 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5442 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5443 * @iter: iterator function
5444 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5445 *
5446 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5447 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5448 * places while calling into the driver.
5449 *
5450 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5451 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5452 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01005453 *
5454 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5455 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5456 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5457 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005458 */
5459void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5460 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5461 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5462 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5463 void *data),
5464 void *iter_data);
5465
5466/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005467 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5468 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5469 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5470 *
5471 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5472 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5473 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5474 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5475 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005476 * %NULL.
5477 *
5478 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005479 */
5480struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5481 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5482
5483/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005484 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5485 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005486 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005487 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005488 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005489 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005490 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5491 */
5492void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005493
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005494/**
5495 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5496 *
5497 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5498 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005499 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005500 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5501 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01005502 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5503 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005504 *
5505 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5506 * without connection recovery attempts.
5507 */
5508void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5509
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005510/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02005511 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5512 *
5513 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5514 *
5515 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5516 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5517 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5518 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5519 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5520 *
5521 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5522 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5523 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5524 * disconnect normally later.
5525 *
5526 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5527 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5528 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5529 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5530 */
5531void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5532
5533/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005534 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5535 * rssi threshold triggered
5536 *
5537 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5538 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
Andrzej Zaborowski769f07d2017-01-25 12:43:40 +01005539 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005540 * @gfp: context flags
5541 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01005542 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005543 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5544 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5545 */
5546void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5547 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
Andrzej Zaborowski769f07d2017-01-25 12:43:40 +01005548 s32 rssi_level,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005549 gfp_t gfp);
5550
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005551/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01005552 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5553 *
5554 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5555 * @gfp: context flags
5556 */
5557void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5558
5559/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01005560 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5561 *
5562 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5563 */
5564void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5565
5566/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005567 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5568 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5569 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5570 *
5571 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5572 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5573 */
5574void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5575
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005576/**
5577 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5578 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005579 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005580 *
5581 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5582 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5583 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5584 */
5585void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5586 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5587
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005588/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005589 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5590 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5591 */
5592void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5593
5594/**
5595 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5596 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5597 */
5598void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5599
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005600/**
5601 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5602 *
5603 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5604 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5605 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5606 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5607 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5608 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5609 *
5610 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5611 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5612 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5613 */
5614void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5615 const u8 *addr);
5616
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005617/**
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02005618 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5619 * @pubsta: station struct
5620 * @tid: the session's TID
5621 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5622 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5623 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5624 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5625 *
5626 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5627 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5628 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5629 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5630 */
5631void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5632 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5633 u16 received_mpdus);
5634
5635/**
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005636 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5637 *
5638 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5639 * buffer.
5640 *
5641 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5642 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5643 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5644 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5645 */
5646void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5647
Luca Coelho1272c5d2017-08-18 15:33:56 +03005648/**
5649 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5650 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5651 * @addr: station mac address
5652 * @tid: the rx tid
5653 */
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005654void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
Luca Coelho1272c5d2017-08-18 15:33:56 +03005655 unsigned int tid);
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005656
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005657/**
5658 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5659 *
5660 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5661 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5662 * reordering.
5663 *
5664 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5665 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5666 *
5667 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5668 * @addr: station mac address
5669 * @tid: the rx tid
5670 */
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005671static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5672 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5673{
5674 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5675 return;
5676 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5677}
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005678
5679/**
5680 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5681 *
5682 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5683 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5684 * reordering.
5685 *
5686 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5687 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5688 *
5689 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5690 * @addr: station mac address
5691 * @tid: the rx tid
5692 */
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005693static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5694 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5695{
5696 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5697 return;
5698 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5699}
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005700
Naftali Goldstein04c2cf32017-07-11 10:07:25 +03005701/**
5702 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5703 *
5704 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5705 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5706 *
5707 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5708 *
5709 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5710 * @addr: station mac address
5711 * @tid: the rx tid
5712 */
5713void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5714 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5715
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005716/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005717
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005718/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005719 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005720 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005721 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5722 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5723 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005724 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5725 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005726 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5727 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5728 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5729 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5730 * RTS threshold
5731 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5732 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005733 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005734 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005735 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005736 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005737struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5738 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5739 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5740 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5741 struct sk_buff *skb;
5742 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5743 bool rts, short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005744 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005745 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005746 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005747};
5748
Johannes Berg09b4a4f2018-08-31 11:31:17 +03005749/**
5750 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
5751 */
5752enum rate_control_capabilities {
5753 /**
5754 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
5755 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
5756 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
5757 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
5758 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
5759 */
5760 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
5761};
5762
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005763struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg09b4a4f2018-08-31 11:31:17 +03005764 unsigned long capa;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005765 const char *name;
5766 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005767 void (*free)(void *priv);
5768
5769 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5770 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005771 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005772 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305773 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005774 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005775 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5776 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005777 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5778 void *priv_sta);
5779
Felix Fietkau18fb84d2017-04-26 17:11:35 +02005780 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
5781 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5782 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005783 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5784 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5785 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005786 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5787 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005788
5789 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5790 struct dentry *dir);
5791 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005792
5793 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005794};
5795
5796static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02005797 enum nl80211_band band,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005798 int index)
5799{
5800 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5801}
5802
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005803/**
5804 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5805 *
5806 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5807 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5808 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5809 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5810 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5811 * not null.
5812 *
5813 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5814 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5815 *
5816 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5817 * that this may be null.
5818 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5819 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5820 */
5821bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5822 void *priv_sta,
5823 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5824
5825
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005826static inline s8
5827rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5828 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5829{
5830 int i;
5831
5832 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5833 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5834 return i;
5835
5836 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005837 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005838
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005839 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005840 return 0;
5841}
5842
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005843static inline
5844bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5845 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5846{
5847 unsigned int i;
5848
5849 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5850 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5851 return true;
5852 return false;
5853}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005854
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005855/**
5856 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5857 *
5858 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5859 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5860 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5861 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5862 *
5863 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5864 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5865 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5866 */
5867int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5868 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5869 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5870
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005871int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5872void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005873
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005874static inline bool
5875conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5876{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005877 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005878}
5879
5880static inline bool
5881conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5882{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005883 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5884 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005885}
5886
5887static inline bool
5888conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5889{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005890 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5891 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005892}
5893
5894static inline bool
5895conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5896{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005897 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005898}
5899
5900static inline bool
5901conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5902{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005903 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5904 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5905 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005906}
5907
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005908static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5909ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5910{
5911 if (p2p) {
5912 switch (type) {
5913 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5914 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5915 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5916 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5917 default:
5918 break;
5919 }
5920 }
5921 return type;
5922}
5923
5924static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5925ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5926{
5927 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5928}
5929
Sara Sharon65554d02016-02-16 12:48:17 +02005930/**
5931 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
5932 *
5933 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5934 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
5935 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
5936 *
5937 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
5938 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
5939 * matching GroupId management frame.
5940 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
5941 */
5942void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5943 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
5944
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005945void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5946 int rssi_min_thold,
5947 int rssi_max_thold);
5948
5949void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005950
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005951/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005952 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005953 *
5954 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5955 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005956 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5957 *
5958 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5959 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005960 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005961int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5962
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005963/**
5964 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5965 * @vif: virtual interface
5966 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5967 * @gfp: allocation flags
5968 *
5969 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5970 */
5971void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5972 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5973 gfp_t gfp);
5974
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005975/**
5976 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5977 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5978 * @vif: virtual interface
5979 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5980 * @band: the band to transmit on
5981 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5982 *
5983 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5984 */
5985bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5986 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5987 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5988
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005989/**
5990 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5991 *
5992 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5993 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5994 *
5995 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5996 *
5997 * private:
5998 *
5999 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6000 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6001 */
6002struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6003 u32 next_tsf;
6004 bool has_next_tsf;
6005
6006 u8 absent;
6007
6008 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6009 struct {
6010 u32 start;
6011 u32 duration;
6012 u32 interval;
6013 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6014};
6015
6016/**
6017 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6018 *
6019 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6020 * @data: NoA tracking data
6021 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6022 *
6023 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6024 */
6025int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6026 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6027
6028/**
6029 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6030 *
6031 * @data: NoA tracking data
6032 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6033 */
6034void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6035
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03006036/**
6037 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6038 * @vif: virtual interface
6039 * @peer: the peer's destination address
6040 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6041 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6042 * @gfp: allocation flags
6043 *
6044 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6045 */
6046void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6047 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6048 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03006049
6050/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02006051 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6052 *
6053 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6054 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6055 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6056 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6057 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6058 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6059 *
6060 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6061 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6062 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6063 *
6064 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6065 * @tid: the TID to reserve
6066 *
6067 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6068 */
6069int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6070
6071/**
6072 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6073 *
6074 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6075 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6076 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6077 *
6078 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6079 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6080 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6081 *
6082 * @sta: the station
6083 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6084 */
6085void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6086
6087/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01006088 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6089 *
6090 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Johannes Berge7881bd52017-12-19 10:11:54 +01006091 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01006092 *
6093 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6094 */
6095struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6096 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Michal Kaziorf2ac7e302016-01-27 15:26:12 +01006097
6098/**
6099 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6100 *
6101 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6102 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6103 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6104 *
6105 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6106 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6107 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6108 */
6109void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6110 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6111 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03006112
6113/**
6114 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6115 *
6116 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6117 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6118 *
6119 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6120 * @inst_id: the local instance id
6121 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6122 * @gfp: allocation flags
6123 */
6124void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6125 u8 inst_id,
6126 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6127 gfp_t gfp);
Ayala Beker92bc43b2016-09-20 17:31:21 +03006128
6129/**
6130 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6131 *
6132 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6133 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6134 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6135 *
6136 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6137 * @match: match event information
6138 * @gfp: allocation flags
6139 */
6140void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6141 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6142 gfp_t gfp);
6143
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07006144#endif /* MAC80211_H */